User manual - EXZR1000_M29_FA

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-ZR1000

ﯽﻟﺎﺘﻴﺠﻳﺩ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ

.ﻢﻳﺭﺍﺰﮕﺳﺎﭙﺳ

CASIO

ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ ﻦﻳﺍ ﺪﻳﺮﺧ ﺮﻃﺎﺧ ﻪﺑ ﺎﻤﺷ ﺯﺍ

•.ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺍﺭ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻦﻳﺍ ﺭﺩ ﺩﻮﺟﻮﻣ ﯽﻨﻤﻳﺍ ﺮﻴﺑﺍﺪﺗ ﺎﻤﺘﺣ ،ﻩﺎﮕﺘﺳﺩ ﺯﺍ ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ ﺯﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ

• .ﺪﻴﻨﮐ یﺭﺍﺪﻬﮕﻧ ﯽﻨﻣﺍ ﻥﺎﮑﻣ ﺭﺩ یﺪﻌﺑ ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻣ یﺍﺮﺑ ﺍﺭ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

• ﺭﺩ

EXILIM

ﯽﻤﺳﺭ ﺖﻳﺎﺳ ﺏﻭ ﺯﺍ ،ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ ﻦﻳﺍ ﻪﺑ ﻁﻮﺑﺮﻣ ﺕﺎﻋﻼﻃﺍ ﻦﻳﺮﺗﺪﻳﺪﺟ ﻪﺑ ﯽﺳﺮﺘﺳﺩ یﺍﺮﺑ

.ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ ﺪﻳﺩﺯﺎﺑ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

Summary of content (207 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪Pr‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ CASIO‬ﺳﭙﺎﺳﮕﺰﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ http://www.exilim.com/‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪(NP-130‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪USB-AC (AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫* ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﮥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻼﺏ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﮥ ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﻼﺏ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻼﺏ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻗﻼﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ‬ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﻣﺸﮑﻮک ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO.
PAGE 5
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪2..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ!‪4.................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪10 ..............................................................................................
PAGE 6
‫❚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‪) ..........................‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‪62 ......‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ‪) ..................................................‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(‪62 .....‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‪) ....................................................‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(‪64 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪) .....................................................‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ(‪64 ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‪65 .... (HDR) ...................
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ..........................................................‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪104 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪105 ... (ISO)..................................................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪)................................................... ISO‬ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ‪106 ...(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪) ..................................................‬ﺯﻭﻡ )‪106 ...((SR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪) ...........................................................
PAGE 8
‫❚❙ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫)‪128 (PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪) ...................................................‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫❚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ(‪128 ...‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪129 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪130 ... (MOTION PRINT) ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪) ............................................................‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪131 ...‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .......
PAGE 9
‫❚❙ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫)‪163 (SETTING‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪) .............................................................‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪163 ...(ECO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪).............................................................‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ(‪163 ...‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪164 ... (Eye-Fi) ................................................ Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪164 ... (FlashAir) .......................................FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪) .......................
PAGE 10
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫]‪ :[6] [4] [2] [8‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫• ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻠﯽ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫‪ .
PAGE 14
‫‪ .‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ )‪ [8] (DISP‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪[8] (DISP‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(190‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﺞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 17‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 82‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﺞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﺞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮐﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪...
PAGE 18
‫‪ .‬ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﺞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ )ﺍﻓﻘﯽ(‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ( ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺁﺭﻡ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪EXILIM‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪USB-AC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪USB-AC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،USB-AC‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(184‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪.
PAGE 24
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ (NP-130‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی )‪ (BC-130L‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺪﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ژﺍﭘﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫• ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ٢۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﻠﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪،37‬‬ ‫‪.(116‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻭی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻗﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ (PRO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪PRO‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ ،PRO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) [0] .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :(STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪70‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪...
PAGE 36
‫‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪PRO‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪ AF‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(109‬‬ ‫– ‪ AF‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(107‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(110‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 116‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪118‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪) [p] ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 119‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ”ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﻮی ”‪ “¥ SETTING‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫( )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [2‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺑﻠﻪ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ”ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ “.‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎی ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪PRO‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ ،PRO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺷﯽء ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) M‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪)  ،[2‬ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪)  ،[2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪*.
PAGE 44
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫]‪[RING‬‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [RING] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 46
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،CS‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎی ﮐﺸﻮﻳﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫« ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ‬ ‫· ‪ WB‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ WB” ‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] ‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ )ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪) [4‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ( ﻭ ]‪) [6‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ( ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫"ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ“ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ U” ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ“ ﻳﺎ ”‪ O‬ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ“ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(107‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ (ISO‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ISO80‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫”‪) 0‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(“ ﺗﺎ ”‪) +12‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ(“ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ‪(EV‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ (EV‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺗﺎ ‪+2.0 EV‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪1/3 EV :‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ‪ (EV‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻓﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪) [2] ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫]‪) [2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ( ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫? ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫• ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮی ﻏﻴﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﺮﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﮏ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﭽﯽ ﺟﻠﻮی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی )ﺍﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ ،HD‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫)ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫)ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ”ﺯﻭﻡ )‪،“(SR‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )ﺯﻭﻡ )‪((SR‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺗﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺗﮑﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ )ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﯽ )‪ (CS‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(61‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‪) [j‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫)ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی )ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [MENU] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[RING‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ ،[4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺮی )‪(ART SHOT‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﺮی ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ HDR‬ﻫﻨﺮی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (65‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﻨﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ HDR‬ﻫﻨﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﭘﺎپ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﭙﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .
PAGE 68
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ‪ HDR‬ﻫﻨﺮی‬ ‫)ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ )‪((HDR ART‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ‪ HDR‬ﻫﻨﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ‪ HDR‬ﻫﻨﺮی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‪ [C‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ CUSTOM SHOT‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ CUSTOM SHOT‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،HDR‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ ،PRO‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ CUSTOM SHOT‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ CUSTOM SHOT‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ U3 ،U2 ،U1 :‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪73‬‬ ‫)‪(STD‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﻳﺎ ]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ (PRO‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .
PAGE 71
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪PRO‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،(33‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪ PRO‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ‪ FHD‬ﻭ ‪ STD‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 72
‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭ( ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻨﮏ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (FHD‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ 16:9 FHD‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ( ﻳﺎ ]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ‪(PRO‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ( ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ”ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ(“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪[SET‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪) ‰‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(( ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(For YouTube) YouTube‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ”‪ “YouTube‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪ YouTube, LLC‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ ،(STD‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫)‪ (FHD‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )‪ (HS‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ”‪ “YouTube‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [MENU] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .
PAGE 78
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی )ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،CS‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ”ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی“ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 80
‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ( ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ( ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ(‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ”ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ“‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺐ“‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪” .
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ )ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﮏ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻴﺮﮔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ”ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ“ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ“ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪” .
PAGE 83
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ”ﺯﻭﻡ )‪) “(SR‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (61‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ? )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 85
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ “...‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮی ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎی ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻴﺮﮔﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ )ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺧﻨﺪﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ( ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪” .۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪی ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ )ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ”ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ“ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ”ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–0.4 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.3 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.2 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.1 sec.‬‬ ‫‪SHUTTER‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫۴‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫٣‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫٢‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫١‬‬ ‫)ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪-‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ(‬ ‫* ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ )‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ(‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ( ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ‪ CS‬ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ CS‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ (CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ”ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ CS‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ“ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 93
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪،[2‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ (CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [4‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ .‬ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ”ﻋﺎﺩی“ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ CS‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .“16:9” ،“3:2” :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ AF-CS‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ 16M‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ CS‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ(‬ ‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪” .۴‬ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻋﮑﺲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪” .۴‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )‪(REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (43‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ”ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 98‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [4‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫”‪ “r REC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ )ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪) [6‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪(L/R‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪L/R‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪) [6‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ( ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫]‪ [4‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [6‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣۴۵۶x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢۵٩٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣۶x٣۶۴٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢۵۶٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١۵٣۶x٢٠۴٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(137‬‬ ‫
PAGE 103
‫• ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ”ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ“ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”‪ “16M‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ”ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ”‪ “10M‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺐ“‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ”ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ“ ﻳﺎ ”‪ CS‬ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ“ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪REC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ”ﺧﻮﺏ“ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﮐﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ( ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ((‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٩‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS1000‬‬ ‫‪ ۴٠٫٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS480‬‬ ‫‪ ۴٠٫٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ۴٨٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫‪ ۴٠٫٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫‪ ۴٠٫٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS30-240‬‬ ‫‪ ۵٫۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪ ۴٠٫۴‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS30-120‬
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ “ISO‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(51‬‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ”ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ“ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ “ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ‪ AF‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ”‪ U‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ“ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ š‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )‪ AF‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (110‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪REC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ )ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻩ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ)ﻫﺎ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺩﻭﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪” ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(57‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ )ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 48‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 45‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ )ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪) +2‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺗﺎ ‪) –2‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪) +2‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ( ﺗﺎ‬ ‫)ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ )ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “r REC MENU‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [6] ،[4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫»‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ ([) z‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪۴٫۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ”ﭼﺮﺧﺶ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ “(136‬ﻳﺎ ”ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (166‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ )‪ (CS‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ‪ CS‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ‪ CS‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [6] ،[4‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [SET‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2] ،([SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ “CS‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯی ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪CS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﮑﯽ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ [4] .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “p PLAY MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ [MENU] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ‪CS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ‪ CS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2] ،([SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ “CS‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﮐﭙﯽ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪ ([) z‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )‪ (EMC-8A‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪(EMC-8A) AV‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ(‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ(‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪) VIDEO IN‬ﺯﺭﺩ(‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 125
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ )‪ [8] (DISP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 126
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻴﻨﯽ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 127
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪) HDMI‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ )‪(PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 98‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ :۵‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ‪ ۵‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫‪ CS‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ”ﻭﻗﻔﻪ“ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ )ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ( ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺭﻭی ”ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ“ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ”‪ “SSBGM‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺑﻠﻪ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺻﺒﺮﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ “...‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ¤‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺍی ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬ ‫' ﺍﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫“ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ )ﭼﺎپ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 143‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ )ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[6‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2] ،([SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ “CS‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ”ﺍﺟﺮﺍ“ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.VGA ،3M ،10M :‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3:2‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،4:3‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ )ﮐﭙﯽ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “p PLAY MENU‬ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪3‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ CS‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﮑﯽ )ﭼﺎپ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪(CS‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3 CS‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺍﻓﻘﯽ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ ﭼﺎپ*‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ*‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ PictBridge‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “USB” ،“¥ SETTING‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ “PictBridge” ،[2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 142
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” ،[2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ ،8.5"×11" ،A4 ،4"×6" ،5"×7" ،3.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ )ﭼﺎپ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫‪ DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪ .‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪3 “p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪ CS‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ CS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2] ،([SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻮی ”ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ “CS‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” ،[2‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﺑﻨﺪی ﻫﻤﻪ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” ،[2‬ﭼﺎپ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.(143‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) (USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(153 ،149‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪(Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(156‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ Windows‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪،Windows Vista‬‬ ‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬ ‫‪149‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 151
‫‪ .١٢‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪” 161‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ‪ Windows Media Player 12‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪ URL‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ Macintosh OS‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺠﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “USB” ،“¥ SETTING‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪” 161‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ )ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 156
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ”‪ “STD‬ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪ QuickTime‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(164‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫)‪(FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ FlashAir‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ”‪) “FlashAir‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (164‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :FlashAir‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪) Start with the control image :‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ(‬ ‫• ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ‪FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻃﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ”ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (161‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ CIMG0001‬ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ CIMG9999‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ (DCF‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ‪ CASIO‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )‪(SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 98‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪Eye-Fi 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪” Eye-Fi‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(156‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪(FlashAir) FlashAir‬‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪FlashAir 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”‪) “Start with the control image‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ”‪ “FlashAir‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(160‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ”‪ “For eBay‬ﻳﺎ ”ﺣﺮﺍﺝ“ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ”‪ “YouTube‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 166
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ )ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ )ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ )ﺳﺒﺰ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ١ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ”ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ“ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪PLAY 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫]‪[p‬‬ ‫)ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ“‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] .۵‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ”ﺧﺎﻧﻪ“ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ژﻭﺋﻴﻪ‪٢٠١۵ ،١٠ ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪15/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪10/7/15‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪7/10/15‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ‪(USB) USB‬‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪USB 3 “¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .(154 ،149‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﻓﺮﻣﺖ(‬ ‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ 3 “¥ SETTING‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 174
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎی ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﻓﻠﺰی ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 175
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮی ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮی ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 176
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﭙﻴﭽﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺎی ﮐﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺸﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺸﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 178
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ CASIO‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﮑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺮک ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺘﻬﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 180
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺟﻠﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 181
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 182
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 183
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺎﻟﮏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 184
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺳﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 28‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،SD‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 187
‫‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍی )ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ( ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(172‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻂ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ )–( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪r REC MENU .
PAGE 189
‫‪p PLAY MENU .‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‪ 3 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬ ‫‪MOTION PRINT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪CS‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪CS‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪¥ SETTING .
PAGE 190
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )‪+‬ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ(‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ”ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ“ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ”ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ“ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(22‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ‪ CASIO NP-130‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ? )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(54‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(26‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﺘﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(170 ،27‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(172‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 197
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ”ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ“ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ”ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (128‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺳﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 198
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ‪ CS‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 199
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣۴۵۶x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢۵٩٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣۶x٣۶۴٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢۵۶٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١۵٣۶x٢٠۴٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٢ SD‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ ١٠٫٧١‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١٠٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫‪ ۵٫۵٧‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪١۶۵۴‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ ٩٫۴٣‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪١٢١۴‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫‪ ۴٫٩٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫
PAGE 200
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫‪FHD‬‬ ‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫)‪(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( *‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HS1000‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۴x٢٢۴‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫‪HS480‬‬ ‫)‪(١۶٠x٢٢۴‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨۴x۵١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫‪HS30-240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨۴x۵١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪HS30-120‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍ
PAGE 201
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ‪) /‬ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (FHD‬‬ ‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (STD‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS1000‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۴x٢٢۴‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS480‬‬ ‫)‪(١۶٠x٢٢۴‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS240‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪٢ SD‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ *‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ*‬ ‫‪ ١۴٫٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪ ٢٧‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ١٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٩‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺛ
PAGE 202
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺪی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ ١۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 203
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ DCF 2.0 ،Exif Version 2.3) JPEG ،*RAW (DNG‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ H.264/AVC ،MOV‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫* ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ DNG‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ،AE‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫‪ –2.0 EV‬ﺗﺎ ‪) +2.
PAGE 205
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻋﺎﺩی )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 206
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ۵٫۶‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ١٠٧٫۵‬ﻃﻮﻝ( ‪) ۶١٫۵ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٣۶٫٧ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫)‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٢۵۵‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ*(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٢١۵‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫* ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDHC‬ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ ١۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫)‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 207
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.